625689
9
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/398
Pagina verder
Seats and Restraint Systems
........................... 1-1
Front Seats
............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-5
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-7
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-25
Airbag System
......................................... 1-45
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-59
Features and Controls
..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows
................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems
............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors
.................................................... 2-31
OnStar
®
System
...................................... 2-34
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
........... 2-36
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-41
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-45
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-45
Instrument Panel
............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
.......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-25
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
Audio System(s)
....................................... 3-56
Driving Your Vehicle
....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-34
Service and Appearance Care
.......................... 5-1
Service
..................................................... 5-3
Fuel
......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
................. 5-8
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-44
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-45
Front Axle
............................................... 5-46
Headlamp Aiming
..................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-51
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-85
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-94
Electrical System
...................................... 5-94
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-106
Maintenance Schedule
..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule
................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information
.............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects
............................ 7-6
Index
................................................................ 1
2005 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M
2005 - Saab 9-7X Owner Manual
Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab 9-7X,
9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registered trademarks
of Saab Automobile, AB.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Saab Automobile, AB whenever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 0597X A First Edition
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
ii
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
iii
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
NOTES
vi
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-5
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-5
Safety Belts .....................................................1-7
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12
Driver Position ..............................................1-12
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-19
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-19
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-22
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-24
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-24
Child Restraints .............................................1-25
Older Children ..............................................1-25
Infants and Young Children ............................1-27
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-31
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-34
Top Strap ....................................................1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-37
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-42
Airbag System ...............................................1-45
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-47
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-50
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-51
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-52
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........1-52
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-54
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-58
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-58
Restraint System Check ..................................1-59
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-60
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
1-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the front
seat cushions. The
horizontal control adjusts
the seat cushion and
the vertical control adjusts
the seatback.
Move the front of the horizontal seat control up or
down to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
Move the rear of the horizontal seat control up or
down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
seat control to move the entire seat up or down.
To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal seat control forward or rearward.
To recline the seatback, press the vertical control
rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical
control forward. See Power Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-4 for more information.
Power Lumbar
The seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your
seating position changes, as it may during long trips,
so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust
the seat as needed.
1-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats.
The buttons used to control
this feature are located
on the front door armrests.
The engine must be
running for the heated seat
feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedly
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, low and off. The indicator lights above the
button will glow to designate the level of heat
selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for
low. The low setting warms the seatback and seat
cushion until the seat temperature is near body
temperature. The medium and high settings heat the
seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher
temperature. You will be able to feel heat in about
two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the button with the
words BACK ONLY. An indicator light on the switch will
glow to designate that only the seatback is being
heated. Additional presses will cycle through the heat
levels for the seatback only.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
1-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The vertical power seat control described earlier allows
the seatback to recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2
for more information.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints lock into place when raised.
To release the head restraint and lower it, press
the tab located on the top of the seatback.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has a 60/40 folding rear seat which lets
you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out
of the way. This will allow the seatbacks to fold flat
and increase the cargo area.
1-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The rear seatback levers
are located on the
outboard side of each
rear seatback.
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the lever.
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the
way when the seatback is folded down.
To raise the seatback, lift up the seatback and push
until it locks into the upright position. Push and pull on
each seatback to make sure they are latched securely.
Then fold the bottom seat cushion back into place.
To return the head restraint to the upright position,
reach behind the seat and pull the restraint up until it
locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to
make sure that it is latched securely.
1-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
1-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even
if you are upside down. And your chance of being
conscious during and after an accident, so you can
unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you
are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
systems only; so they work with safety belts — not
instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for
sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to
buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
1-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident even one that is not your fault you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-27. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
1-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-24.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
1-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
1-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
1-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-19
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-24.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-20
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1-21
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When attached to
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to attach the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-22
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-19.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip
located between the interior body and the seatback.
1-23
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see them,
they are located on the retractor part of the safety belts.
They help the safety belts reduce a person’s forward
movement in a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal or
side crash or a rollover.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-60.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
1-24
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be
worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-25
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 1-22. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
1-26
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-27
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-28
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
1-29
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-30
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-31
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-32
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-33
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be
secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of
personal injury. When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in
a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
1-34
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always to
be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-35
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in
Top Strap Anchor Location on page 1-37. Be sure to
use an anchor point located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
If the position you are using has an adjustable head
restraint, fold down the head restraint and route the top
strap under it. See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-5.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-36
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seating
positions. The anchors are located on the floor in the rear
cargo area of your vehicle. Do not use the rear tie-down
brackets near the liftgate for top strap tethers.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in this position.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
in the outside seating positions in the second row.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-37
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors for this
child restraint system,
each seating position
with the LATCH system
has a label on the
seatback at each lower
anchor position.
The labels are located above a flap at the base of the
seatback in the rear outside seating positions. The
anchors are located under the flap. In order to get to the
anchors, you will need to pull the strap at the center
of the seat, where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out
of the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then
lower the seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked
into place.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-38
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of
the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-35.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-39
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-40
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the child
restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat
position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-39.
1-41
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-34.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30
for more information on this including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
1-42
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-54. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-30.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-43
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the inside
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the
key is turned to RUN or START.
1-44
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle also has roof-mounted side impact airbags
designed for either side impact or rollover deployment.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for
the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-45
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
The roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal or in rear crashes. The rollover capable
airbags have been designed to deploy the
roof-mounted side impact airbags in the event
of a vehicle rollover.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-46
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-47
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
the person seated directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-48
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, because your vehicle
has roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tiedown through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
1-49
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
object were moving.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
1-50
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags and
a rollover sensor. See Airbag System on page 1-45.
These “rollover capable” airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes or during a
rollover. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road Driving
on page 4-13.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the case
of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted side impact
airbag, the sensing system detects that the vehicle is
about to roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The
inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the
instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.
For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact airbags,
the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side windows.
1-51
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including many frontal or near frontal collisions, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions or rollovers for the roof-mounted
side impact airbags.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag or
the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows will
be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not too
hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
1-52
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-5.
Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
1-53
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. A passenger airbag
status indicator in the rearview mirror will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-30.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Canada
1-54
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-55
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-42.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
1-56
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-57
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-7.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
1-58
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the airbag system. If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-59
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the airbags inflate you will also need to replace the
driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the airbags have not deployed. The driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.
1-60
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
PASS-Key
®
III ..............................................2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation ...............................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-20
Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-22
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-24
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass ............2-31
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-33
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-34
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-34
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
OnStar
®
System .............................................2-34
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System ...............2-36
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
Operation .................................................2-37
Storage Areas ................................................2-41
Glove Box ...................................................2-41
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-41
Overhead Console ........................................2-41
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-41
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-42
Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-43
Cargo Cover ................................................2-44
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-44
Sunroof .........................................................2-45
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-45
Memory Seat ...............................................2-45
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door lock.
It will fit with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-4.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar
®
system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar
®
may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar
®
System on page 2-34
for more information.
The key can not be removed from the ignition if your
vehicle does not have power. See Ignition Positions on
page 2-20 for additional information.
2-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on page 2-6.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this system you can lock and unlock your doors
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away
using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press the
unlock button to
automatically unlock the
driver’s door. The parking
lamps may flash and the
interior lights will go on.
Press the unlock button
again and all remaining
doors will unlock.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
Press the lock button again within three seconds
and the horn may chirp.
L (Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol to make the
horn sound. The headlamps and taillamps will also flash
for up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
the horn button again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by
starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
2-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close to
your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message when the
transmitter battery is low. See “KEY FOB # BATTERY
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the remote
keyless entry cover and gently pry the transmitter
apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry transmitter or you
can use your key to unlock your door from the outside.
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by
sliding the manual lever forward or rearward.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
2-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.
To unlock the doors, press the other side of the switch.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A chime
will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for
up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by
using the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock
button on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter
a second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on page 2-12.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off.
If the feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Switch
shown, Front
Passenger’s Side
Switch similar
2-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-50.
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the two programming options
listed previously, and press the lock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
lock options. You will have 30 seconds to
begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate
that you have left the program mode. If this
occurs, repeat the procedure beginning with
Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
2-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming options:
Mode 1: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted
to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to
program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the four programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the
horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the rear
doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by
passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
security lock lever located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
2. Move the lever down to
engage the security
lock. Move the lever up
to disengage the
security lock.
3. Close the door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force outside
air into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
Liftgate Release
To unlock the liftgate, you may use the power door locks
or the remote keyless entry system described earlier.
The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is
unlocked. Press the button on the liftglass to open.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the liftgate. If you open the liftgate, the
liftgate module will lock the liftglass after a one to
two second delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Power Windows
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-20. The driver’s door also has a switch for
each of the passenger’s windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window and
pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold the
switch down for three to seven seconds after the window
has been completely lowered or raised, the window will
not operate for about 15 seconds.
Express-Down Window
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the
driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap
the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top
of the switch.
Window Lockout
o
(Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can pull the visor down.
You can also slide the visor along the rod from
side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger front
window.
2-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped
with a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Here is how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. You should also remember that you can start
your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
2-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
PASS-Key
®
III
Your PASS-Key
®
III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key
®
III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key
®
III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key
®
III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key
®
III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This means you do not have to do anything different to
arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or
remove the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key
®
III system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems.
The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered
to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to
start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-95. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the PASS-Key
®
III to have a new
key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key
®
III decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for programming additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key
®
III to
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
2-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you
turn it off. Your PASS-Key
®
III system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key
®
III
system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key
®
III key, see your
dealer to have a new key made.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-35 for more information.
2-19
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
The ignition switch
is located on the center
console.
9 (OFF/LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to OFF/LOCK and the vehicle has power.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is, turn
the steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
ACC (Accessory): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain
the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting.
Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
R (RUN): This is the position for driving.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition key is turned to OFF/LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, DVD player, sunroof (option)
and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN
to OFF/LOCK, these features will continue to work for up
to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-20
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or 18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-21
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change
the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers,
since the pedals cannot move farther away from the
standard position, but can move closer for better
pedal reach. This feature can be programmed to work
with the memory function, if equipped, on your
vehicle. See Memory Seat on page 2-45.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the steering column.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer of farther away from you.
2-22
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very
cold weather, 0°F (18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured.
Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle.
The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-23
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-35.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system.
2-24
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
You have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever, press the button on the shift lever and push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Move the shift lever into the gear you
wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-29.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice
or sand without damaging your transmission, see If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose
control and hit people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-25
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or,
if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission
shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use the brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the gear shift
lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-26
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake lever
located between the seats. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the button
in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
2-27
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing the
button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-28
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-29
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-24.
2-30
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-35.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror with
Compass
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with an
eight-point compass display located in the upper right
portion of the mirror.
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the rearview
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip it
in the center and move it up or down and side to side.
The day/night control, located at the bottom of the mirror,
adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare from behind
during evening or dark conditions. Rotate the control to
the right for night time use; rotate it to the left for day use.
Compass Display
P
(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass on
or off. The compass display, can show a maximum of two
characters. For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature feature
are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing.
2-31
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display does
not show a compass direction, (N for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a
similar magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in
the compass window, the compass may need calibration.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, the compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
the on/off button quickly until the correct zone
number appears in the display. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
2-32
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Outside Power Mirror
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver’s door.
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so that you can
see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your
vehicle.
4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control to the
center position so the mirror cannot be moved.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode.
This action is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror
can go no further. To stop this action, back the mirror up
by moving the control in the opposite direction.
Fold the mirror in manually before entering a car wash.
To do this, pull the mirror in toward the vehicle. Push the
mirror back out when finished.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The passenger’s outside mirror will adjust to a preset tilt
position while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb
view assist may be useful when you are parallel parking.
The mirror will return to normal position when the vehicle
is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror
movement in either direction will follow a short delay.
You can turn this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-50.
2-33
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside
rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
condensation.
OnStar
®
System
OnStar
®
uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar
®
user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar
®
Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar
®
at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar
®
button to speak to an OnStar
®
advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
OnStar
®
Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar
®
, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar
®
button to speak
with an advisor.
2-34
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Safe and Sound Plan
Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Tracking
Accident Assist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
Remote Diagnostics
Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions
Ride Assist
Information and Convenience Services
OnStar
®
Personal Calling
As an OnStar
®
subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is an available hands-free wireless phone that
is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar
®
Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar
®
user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak to an OnStar
®
advisor by pressing the OnStar
®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar
®
Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
®
Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customize your
information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar
®
user’s guide for more information.
2-35
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
OnStar
®
Steering Wheel Controls
A steering wheel control
can be used to interact
with the OnStar
®
personal
calling feature.
To make a phone call, press the Talk/Mute button with
this symbol on the steering wheel, say “dial”, then
say the number you wish to dial with no pauses.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press the Talk/Mute button, say the number
one at a time, wait for the response to each digit, then
say “dial.”
See the OnStar
®
user’s guide for more information.
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System
HomeLink
®
, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink
®
information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-36
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink
®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System Operation
Do not use the HomeLink
®
Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8
to complete the programming of your HomeLink
®
Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink
®
Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink
®
programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons should be erased for
security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink
®
Buttons”
or, for assistance, contact HomeLink
®
on the Internet at:
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
2-37
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Programming HomeLink
®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink
®
buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink
®
and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink
®
successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink
®
button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should activate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink
®
buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink
®
.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached
to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
2-38
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
®
button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink
®
buttons, begin
with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink
®
.” You do not
want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink
®
to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the “Programming
HomeLink
®
procedures (regardless of where you live),
replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink
®
with
the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
®
button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by HomeLink
®
. The indicator light
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with
Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink
®
to complete.
Using HomeLink
®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink
®
button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
2-39
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Erasing HomeLink
®
Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink
®
is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink
®
shown earlier in this
section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink
®
Button” following this section.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink
®
using a HomeLink
®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink
®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink
®
shown earlier in this section.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink
®
to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink
®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
®
at
1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-40
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on the handle.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a cupholder on the
instrument panel next
to the radio. To open the
cupholder, push once
on the arm and the
cupholder will move
into position for use.
To close the cupholder,
lift the arm up towards the
instrument panel.
A molded cupholder is located on the front of the center
console and two more are located at the rear of the
center console. To use the rear cupholders, pull down
on the lid.
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a HomeLink
®
transmitter, and a sunroof switch. See the following for
more information:
Reading Lamps on page 3-18
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System on page 2-36
Sunroof on page 2-45
Center Console Storage Area
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it.
The console may contain one or more of the following
components:
Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-92 for more information.
Rear Climate Control. See Rear Climate Control
System on page 3-24 for more information.
Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-19 for more information.
Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
underneath the front edge of the armrest. The storage
area includes slots for cassettes or compact discs.
2-41
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier
that allows you to load things on top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier, if equipped, has side rails attached
to the roof, and places to use for tying things down.
These let you load some other things on top of
your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer
than the luggage carrier.
Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
2-42
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind
noise. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the
vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of
the rear door.
Rear Floor Storage Lid
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward
mounting slots.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
2-43
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
There may be cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you
to strap cargo in and keep
it from moving.
2-44
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Sunroof
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. The ignition must be on, or turned to ACC,
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active
to operate it. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-20.
The sunroof switch is
located in the overhead
console.
Press and release the back of the button to open the
sunroof. Press and hold the front of the button to close
the sunroof.
With the sunroof closed, press the front of the button to
open the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade is in the
closed position, it will open when the sunroof is opened.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
The controls for the
memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
The settings for these features can be saved for up
to two drivers.
2-45
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, pressing the other numbered memory
control button.
To recall the memory settings, press and release
button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
A single chime will sound and the memory position
will be recalled.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or entering
the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline, and
adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored
or recalled when using the easy exit seat function.
The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers.
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory control
for less than three seconds. The seat will move to the
stored memory position.
1. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
2. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to let
you know that the position has been stored for the
selected button 1 or 2.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, pressing the other numbered memory
control button.
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The seat will
move to the stored exit position.
Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-50 for more information on
activating this feature in the DIC.
2-46
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-18
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Reading Lamps ............................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Rear Climate Control System .........................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-28
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-38
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-39
Security Light ...............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-40
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-41
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-41
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-42
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-50
Audio System(s) .............................................3-56
Setting the Time ...........................................3-56
Radio with CD ..............................................3-57
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-69
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-81
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-81
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-92
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-93
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-94
Radio Reception ...........................................3-95
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-95
Care of the CD and DVD Player .....................3-95
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-96
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-96
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
NOTES
3-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-94.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver
Information Center Buttons. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 or Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-43.
H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 3-10.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-9.
K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-18.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-56.
M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-20.
N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-19.
R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-41.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-41.
3-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
You should adjust the
steering wheel before you
drive. The tilt lever is
located to the left of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
3-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
on page 3-8.
- Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17.
I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane change
indicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
3-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-95 and check for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
3-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Windshield Wipers
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-51.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Windshield Washer
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, press the windshield washer paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This control is located to
the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper
off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
3-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlamp washer
system. The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with fluid, waiting
for about five seconds, then rinsing the loose debris from
the lenses.
The headlamp washers are located under the
headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for one
wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front windshield washer
button is pressed for the first time after your vehicle is
turned on. The headlamps washers then activate
automatically for one cycle after every four front
windshield washes.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
washed. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for more
information.
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
R(On): This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set): Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak
®
feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak
®
to activate.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak
®
system activate,
if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:
O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and Automatic
Headlamps. Turning the control to this position again
turns the automatic lighting system back on. This feature
is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
3-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL will activate when the following conditions
are met:
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps or
headlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equipped with the
High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system option, the
DRL system will turn on your turn signal lamps. If your
vehicle is not equipped with HID, the DRL system will turn
on your headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The instrument
panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
3-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems, so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
your instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, start your vehicle and turn the headlamp
switch to the off position. The switch will automatically
return to the AUTO position. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you turn the switch to the
off position again as explained in “Headlamps”. See
Headlamps on page 3-14. This feature is not available
for vehicles first sold in Canada.
3-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog
lamps on and off.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
also turn on. A message will also display on the
DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release it.
The band will return to its original position.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a message
will appear on the Driver Information Center. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn the knob to adjust the
instrument panel lights.
Turn the knob all the way
up to turn on the interior
lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
3-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override button
is located to the left of the
steering column.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come on when
you open any door.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps will come
on as long as the dome override lamp override button is
not pressed in. When all the doors are closed, the
lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then
turn off automatically. If you use your remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior lights
will come on for a short time whether or not the dome
lamp override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome
override is on, these lights will stay on for a short period
of time and then will go out.
Reading Lamps
Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading
lamps located in the overhead console to turn them on
or off.
3-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy and vanity
lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep your battery from
running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most conditions, if they are left on.
To turn them back on, turn the exterior lamps knob.
After turning them back on, the lights will not turn
off again unless the vehicle has been started.
Accessory Power Outlets
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated at a
maximum of 20 Amps.
There are two outlets to the right of the cupholder on
the floor console.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. Replace the cover
when not in use.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-19
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle
is first started and the climate control system is on, or if
the climate control system has been turned on, the
display will show the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds. Then it will show the outside temperature.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob to turn the system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver.
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
temperature setting if the two are linked.
3-20
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
the temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the
passenger. The passenger’s temperature setting can be
set to match and link to the driver’s temperature setting
by pressing and holding the AUTO button for three
seconds. When adjusting the driver’s side temperature
setting, the passenger’s side temperature setting will
follow and both arrows will appear on the display. The
passenger’s side temperature setting also resets and
relinks to the driver’s side temperature setting if the
vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
Outside Air Temperature Display
A new outside temperature reading will be displayed if
the vehicle has been off for more than three hours. If the
vehicle has been off for less than three hours, the old
temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take several
minutes of driving before the display updates to
the actual outside temperature.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air outlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
run continuously when the outside temperature is
over approximately 40°F (4°C). The air inlet
will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside,
the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to adjust. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
3-21
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Manual Operation
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. The
display will change to show you the selected fan speed
and the driver’s side temperature setting for five seconds.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
for five seconds.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
and side window outlets. The recirculation button cannot
be selected in floor mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will also come on to let you
know that it is activated. Recirculation mode is used to
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to
help prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering your
vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more
quickly. Recirculation mode can be used with vent and
bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog or
defrost modes. Defog and defrost modes are described
later in this section.
If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or
defrost modes, the indicator will flash three times and
then turn off indicating the selection is not available.
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal and will
help to prevent fogging.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode. If the
windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost mode.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
engine is turned off.
3-22
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will automatically
begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
off when the air conditioning is off.
If you turn the air conditioning off while in front defrost
or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol will turn
off, however, the A/C compressor will remain on to help
de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of the
other modes is selected the compressor will then turn
the A/C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button
is pressed.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of moisture
condensing on the cool window glass. This can be
reduced if the climate control system is used properly.
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the floor
and windshield outlets.
0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to
clear the windshield and side windows of frost or
fog quickly. The system will automatically control the fan
speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
If equipped, your heated mirrors will also come on when
you press this button.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-23
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
sides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, select
maximum blower speed for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Rear Climate Control System
The lower buttons on the rear seat audio are used to
adjust the rear seat climate controls. The temperature of
the air coming through the rear outlets is determined
by the front passenger’s temperature setting.
z9y (Fan) Press this button to adjust the fan
speed.
z\y (Mode) Press this button to change the
direction of airflow in the rear seat area to either vent,
bi-level or floor mode.
P (On/Off) Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
not in defrost mode.
3-24
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC) that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
3-25
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-26
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The new one will be set to
the correct mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
3-27
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-45.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Canada
3-30
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-29.
3-31
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on,
or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range.
United States Canada
3-32
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem. A chime
may also sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
United States
Canada
3-33
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds, that is
normal. A chime may also
sound when the light
comes on.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33 earlier in this
section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine
coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will
be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
United States
Canada
3-35
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
Light On Steady An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
3-36
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-6. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-37
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
United States
Canada
3-38
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
Change Engine Oil Light
When this light comes on,
it means that an oil change
and other maintenance
procedures are required for
your vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-14 for more information.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will be displayed when the engine is on. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-17 for more information.
3-39
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
See PASS-Key
®
III Operation on page 2-18 for
additional information regarding the security light.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise light appears
whenever you set your
cruise control.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light is displayed
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
3-40
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
The service all-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by
the system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system
is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly
diagnosing a malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
3-41
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on, your
liftgate or liftglass is not
completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
or liftglass even partially open.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States Canada
3-42
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-4.
Check Gas Cap Light
If equipped, this light will
come on if your gas cap is
not securely fastened.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35 for more
information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy,
customization features, and warning/status messages.
r (Fuel Information): Press this button to display the
fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-44 for more information.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, and timer. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information.
3-43
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
q (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-50 for more information.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
any warning or service messages.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center
of the instrument panel, above the radio. These buttons
are fuel information, trip information, customization,
and select. The button functions are detailed in
the following pages.
Fuel Information Button
r
(Fuel Information): Press this button to scroll
through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
3-44
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current and
past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-17.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-14 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Trip Information Button
3
(Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the trip stem located
on the instrument panel cluster with the vehicle off
will also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
3-45
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you press and
hold the trip stem or the select button for four seconds,
the display will show the distance traveled since the
last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Customization Button
q
(Customization): Press this button to access the
VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings
to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-50 for more information.
Select Button
r
(Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions, turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC
display, and set your customization settings. For
example, this button will allow you to reset the trip
odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and scroll through and select the desired language
information is displayed in the DIC.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. More than one message may appear at
one time. They will appear one after the other. Some
messages may not require immediate action but
you should press the trip stem on the instrument panel
cluster or any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
that you received the message and clear it from the
display. Some messages cannot be cleared from
the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
3-46
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked by your Saab dealer as soon as
possible. See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-32. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34. Press
the select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
The CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayed
when the passenger outside rearview mirror moves into
the curb view position. See Outside Curb View Assist
Mirror on page 2-33 for more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-25 for the proper course
of action. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-25 for more information.
3-47
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF
If the fog lamps are turned off, this message will appear
on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will also turn off and this message will appear on the
DIC. The fog lamps will turn back on again when
you switch back to low-beam headlamps. See Fog
Lamps on page 3-17 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7 for more information.
FRONT FOG LAMPS ON
If the fog lamps are turned on, this message will appear
on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds. See
Fog Lamps on page 3-17 and Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-43, Filling the Tank on page 5-6 and Fuel on
page 5-4 for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,
the message will clear. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-6. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-48
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
by your Saab dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for more information.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
liftgate and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 2-13.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
Saab dealer inspect the system for problems. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29 and Airbag
System on page 1-45 for more information. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-49
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your Saab dealer.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear on the DIC and a chime will
sound. Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-6. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. The DIC message will remain
on until the message is cancelled with the return button
on the steering wheel. The DIC message will also be
cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is
still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-35 for more information.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be displayed on
your Driver Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
3-50
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS: IN
GEAR appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while LOCK
DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the
select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
3-51
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
your preference for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following
choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
3-52
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see “Easy Exit Seat”
under Memory Seat on page 2-45.
3-53
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Curb View
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
position, following a short delay.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
View Assist Mirror on page 2-33.
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for alarm warning, press the select button while
ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16.
3-54
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Language
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your
preference for display language, press the select button
while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
ENGLISH (default)
FRANCAIS (French)
ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be in
Spanish. Release both buttons when the desired
language appears. All DIC messages will then appear in
that language.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
as long as you are in the odometer mode.
Units
Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select English or
metric, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)
UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information will be
displayed in English units. For example, distance will be
displayed in miles and fuel economy in miles per
gallon (MPG). If METRIC (km/L) is chosen, all
information will be displayed in metric units. For
example, distance will be displayed in kilometers and
fuel economy in kilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC
(L/100 km) is chosen, all information will be displayed in
metric units. For example, distance will be displayed
in kilometers and fuel economy in liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and exit out of the customizable options.
3-55
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your
vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
that it can be added by checking with your dealer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it
is very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of your
vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
with the operation of sound equipment that has been
added.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system. If
that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is
added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM or PM will appear on the display (Radio
with CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)). Press and
hold M until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
3-56
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Radio with CD
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers over
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
P
(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until you see the display you want, then hold this
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
3-57
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if
the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF
appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press and release the right or the left
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay
there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and
the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
and the radio will produce two beeps. The radio will go to
a preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
3-58
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the information
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the information button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e
(Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
The radio will produce one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
3-59
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are included
only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose
®
system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the tone knob until BASS and TREB
appears on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e
(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, push and release
this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the speaker knob until FAD
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push the tone knob,
then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
station.
4. To go to another station within that category and
the category is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer on
the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
3-60
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
ERR appears on the display it means that the radio has
not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
3-61
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
CH Unavl Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
3-62
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
Unknown Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1
r (Previous): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the track.
2
[ (Next): Press this pushbutton to fast forward
within the track.
3-63
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT ON will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
appear on the display.
4
y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on
the display.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If a track is
approximately 10 seconds into its song, press either
the left or right arrow twice to get to the previous or
next track.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display.
The CD will search the previous or next tracks at
two seconds per track. Press either arrow to stop
scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. The elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display. To change
the default on the display, track or elapsed time, press
this button until you see the display you want, then
hold the button for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-64
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs, 40 kpbs,
56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs,
160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or
a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album will
be available when recorded using ID3 tags version 1.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions
minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name.
You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no
file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in
trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
be located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-65
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the file name will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-66
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1
s (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the same track. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2
\ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to fast
forward within the track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the CD.
3
N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT On will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
appear on the display.
4
y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and CD RDM will appear on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
5
! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode will take you to the
previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
6
# (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this button while
in folder random mode will take you to the next
folder and random the tracks in that folder.
3-67
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Press either arrow for more than
two seconds and SCAN will appear on display. The
radio will scan the previous or next tracks at two tracks
per second. Release the arrow to stop scanning and
to play the track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode will display the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
4 (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information.
Press this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-68
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers over
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-69
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Playing the Radio
P
(Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting
will allow for more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AVOL OFF appears on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
t SEEK u: Press and release the right or the left
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds.
SCAN will appear on the display and the radio will
produce one beep. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-70
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Press and hold this button until PSCN will appear on
the display and the radio will produce two beeps.
The radio will go to a preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-71
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e
(Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
The radio will produce one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are included
only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose
®
system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the tone knob until the BASS and TREB
appears on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e
(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, push and release
this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the tone knob until FAD
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the tone knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push and hold
the tone knob when no tone or speaker control is
displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
and you will hear a beep.
3-72
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
station.
4. To go to another station within that category and
the category is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer on
the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category,
NOT FOUND will appear on the display and the radio
will return to the last station you were listening to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-73
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-74
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition Action Required
No Info Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-75
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
3-76
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD button,
then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds
to the CD. A small bar will appear under the CD number
that is playing and the track number will appear on
the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # will appear on the display.
The CD will eject and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
the eject button, causing the player to not eject the
CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
r (Reverse): Press this button to reverse
within the track.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
within the track.
3-77
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
N (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the repeat button. RPT ON will appear on
the display. Press this button again to turn off repeat
play. RPT OFF will appear on the display.
To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the repeat button for two seconds. RPT ON
will appear on the display. Press this button again
to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will appear on
the display.
y (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the random
button. RANDOM ONE will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press this
button again to turn off random play.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving backward or forward
through the CD.
To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track,
play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until CD SCAN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. Use this feature
to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded
CD. Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-78
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Using Song List Mode
R
(Song List): The six-disc CD changer has a
feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear on the
display. If S-LIST is present, press the song list
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. the track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save the
track into memory. When the song list button is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the song
list button, two beeps will sound to confirm the track
has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to
the first saved track.
3-79
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
When the song list button is pressed, one beep will
be heard immediately. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the song list button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track
has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more than
four seconds. One beep will be heard, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating the song list has
been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
3-80
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program
Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of
music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio
Service capabilities (if equipped). The radio can
also communicate with the navigation system to
broadcast announcements on traffic, weather, and
emergency alert communications. For information on
how to use this system, see the “Navigation System”
manual.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition
is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
3-81
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob.
To adjust the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about four
minutes to save battery power. The signal may be lost if
the system is turned off or if the headphones are out
of range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
3-82
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL
system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal by
infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as an
audio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSE
system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 3-92 for more information.
3-83
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones or the
remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-84
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-85
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
3-86
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-87
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-88
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Disc will not play. The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the display
menu.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into the
DVD player.
The disc is being stored in
the DVD player. Press the
eject button again to eject
the disc.
3-89
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Problem Recommended Action
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the audio
or on the screen is wrong.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Problem Recommended Action
After stopping the player, I
push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I
left off and sometimes at
the beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
3-90
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips or
jumps.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from the radio
for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio
from the DVD or CD when
using the wired
headphones.
The RSE is working
correctly.
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
3-91
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar
®
System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to select and
listen to any of the available radio sources: AM/FM,
XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear seat passenger
cannot control a source selected on the radio by
someone in the front of the vehicle. For example, the
RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the radio is
set to CD. Also, if the radio is switched to a source
the RSA has control of, sound will not be lost, but the
RSA will lose control of that sourse.
Rear seat passengers always have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition key
is positioned in the power mode, see Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 in this manual.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or
off. The rear speakers are muted when the power
is turned on.
u (Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand knob
controls the headphone outlet on the right. Turn
either knob clockwise to increase the volume and
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
3-92
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening. There are sources that are internal to the radio,
such as AM/FM, and CD and other sources to radio
that are external, such as XM™, DVD, and OnStar
®
.If
an external source has been selected, the rear seat
passengers cannot select a different external source.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station or CD
track and stay there. The display will show the
selection. This function is inactive if the radio is set to
the same source.
To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the SEEK
button for two seconds and the radio will go to the
next preset station. Hold this button down and the radio
will continue to go through all available preset stations.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press and
hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go you to the
next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK
®
is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK
®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK
®
activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-93
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
u SEEK t: Press the forward or the back arrow to
go to the next or to the previous radio station and
stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the forward or the back
arrow to fast forward or reverse.
g (OnStar/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar
®
, press
this button to interact with the OnStar
®
system. See
the OnStar
®
manual provided with your vehicle for more
information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar
®
, press this button
to mute the system. Press it again, or any other radio
button, to turn on the sound.
NXT (Next): Press this button to play a station you
have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
+ SRC (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus ()
button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded
the CD symbol will appear on the display.
+ VOL (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the minus ()
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-94
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-95
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of
the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-96
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-8
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-11
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-15
City Driving ..................................................4-18
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-20
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29
Towing ..........................................................4-34
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-34
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-34
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ....................................................4-34
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-35
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
4-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-7.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
4-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Many adults by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
4-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can
lose control of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
4-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move
the vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Your vehicle has this feature. There is no lever or
switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully
automatic and adjusts as needed for road conditions.
Your vehicle has an active transfer case allowing
two-wheel-drive operation on dry roads. The transfer
case will shift automatically into all-wheel drive on
slippery surfaces. You may feel an extra shift when the
all-wheel drive engages.
4-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems steering and acceleration have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to
go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate
your right lane change signal and move back into the
right lane. Remember that your right outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may
not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is
skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make
a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have
any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Your vehicle does not have features like added
ground clearance, special underbody shielding,
and a transfer case low gear range, things that are
necessary for extended or severe off-road service.
You should not drive off-road unless you are on a
level, solid surface.
4-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Do not drink and drive.
Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
4-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does
not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry
roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower
and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-54.
4-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out
for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would
for a cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-19.
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
4-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
4-19
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh such as after
a day’s work do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-20
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
in less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-21
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
4-22
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items
in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
4-24
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-6.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-25
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-26
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-27
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need
to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help
you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a
few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
4-28
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-54
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Label Example
4-29
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-35 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 1
4-30
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 2
Example 3
4-31
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
4-32
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-33
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-4.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled
air suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload. The system
includes a compressor, two height sensors, and two air
springs supporting the rear axle.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating. If the system overheats, all leveling function
stops until the system cools down. During this time, the
indicator light on the air inflator system will be flashing.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate, in
order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height
after loading. The system can lower the vehicle to the
standard ride height after unloading with the ignition
on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has
been turned off.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
4-34
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Overload Protection
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear axle
load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
When the overload protection mode is activated, the
compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute
without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of
overload. This will continue each time the ignition is
turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
below GAWR.
Indicator Light
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on
the ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle
can be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you
should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
4-35
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-36
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR
AWD (L6 Engine) 3.73 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
AWD (V8 Engine) 3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-37
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
up to a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
4-38
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29 for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you
apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
4-39
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
The trailer parts can withstand
3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
4-40
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-30. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-20.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to
know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as
your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
4-41
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
4-42
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before
you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-43
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailer towing
harness. This harness has a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform.
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring terminal
must be fastened to a stud on the underhood
electrical center before the trailer feed will
become active.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
trailer brake controller. These wires are located
inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel. These wires should be connected to
an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a qualified service center.
4-44
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-4
California Fuel ...............................................5-4
Additives .......................................................5-5
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-5
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-8
Checking Things Under the Hood .....................5-8
Hood Release ................................................5-9
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-10
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-22
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-25
Engine Overheating .......................................5-25
Cooling System ............................................5-27
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-32
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-44
Rear Axle .......................................................5-45
Front Axle ......................................................5-46
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-47
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-48
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-50
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51
Windshield Replacement .................................5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-70
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-71
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-72
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-74
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-82
Spare Tire ...................................................5-84
Appearance Care ............................................5-85
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-85
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-87
Leather .......................................................5-87
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-88
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-89
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-89
Finish Care ..................................................5-89
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-90
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-91
Tires ...........................................................5-91
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-92
Finish Damage .............................................5-92
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-92
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-93
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-94
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-94
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-94
Electrical System ............................................5-94
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94
Headlamps ..................................................5-95
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-95
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-95
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-103
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-106
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service and parts needs.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
5-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
We recommend that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. We recommend
that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply
with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We do not recommend
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
5-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-89.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap is
not properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Light
on page 3-43 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-35.
5-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Hood Release
1. To open the hood,
first pull the handle
with this symbol on it.
It is located inside
the vehicle under the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood latch up and to the right to
release it, then lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat
the process if necessary.
5-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-27.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-33.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-25.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
I. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-39.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35.
K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-95.
5-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-27.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-25.
H. Remote Negative () Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-39.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-33.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-95.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
5-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
L6 Engine
V8 Engine
5-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L) for the
L6 engine or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick for the V8 engine, you will need to add
at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-106.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, your engine
could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting standard
GM6094M. You should look for and use only an
oil that meets standard GM6094M.
SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet standard GM6094M
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-39. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will
perform this work and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
light being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the following:
1. Use the fuel button on the Driver Information Center
to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.
2. Press and hold the select button on the Driver
Information Center five seconds while ENGINE
OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display for 10 seconds
to let you know the system is reset.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
5-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine cleaner/filter and
lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Do not drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
5-19
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check
the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
5-20
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic transmission
dipstick handle with this
symbol on it is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If inconsistent readings persist, contact your dealer.
5-21
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL
®
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-22
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL
®
coolant. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-23
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. The cap
has this symbol on it.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10
for more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-27.
5-24
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35 for more information.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-25
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-26
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
5-27
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not,
you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-28
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-29
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-30
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-31
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-32
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10
for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level
should be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the
5.3L V8 engine, the level should be at the FULL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-33
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-10 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-34
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-35
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-85.
5-36
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-37
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
We recommend an ACDelco
®
replacement battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10
for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative () cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-39
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
5-38
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
5-39
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative () terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative ()
jump starting terminal. You should always use this
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
battery. The remote negative () terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with
the 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive
bracket for vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, and is
marked GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-10 for more information on
location.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-40
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative () or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect
the negative () cable to the negative () terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-41
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the
negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative () cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative ()
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
The remote negative () terminal is located on the
front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine, and on
the accessory drive bracket for the 5.3L V8 engine.
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable to
the remote negative () terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
5-42
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative () Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
5-43
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-44
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-45
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-46
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam
headlamps may be necessary if it is difficult to see the
lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers
flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer
for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-51.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-47
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Halogen Bulb Replacement
A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Parking/Turn Signal
D. Sidemarker
5-48
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-9
for more information.
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to release the
headlamp assembly from the vehicle.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the circular bulb cover for the high and
low-beam bulbs.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
6. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
7. Install a new bulb and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the circular bulb covers, if necessary.
9. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the
headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp
retaining clips
10. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
HID Low-Beam Bulb Replacement
If your vehicle has HID low-beam headlamps and a bulb
needs to be replaced, see your dealer for replacement.
5-49
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
A. Back-up
B. Turn Signal
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 2-13 for more information.
2. Remove the screws
from the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
5-50
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly into the vehicle and
tighten the two screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamp 921
Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp 5702 NAK
Front/Rear Sidemarker 194
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam 9005
Low-Beam (Halogen Only) H11
Rear Turn Signal 3757 AK
Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced
be sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will
continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield
can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield.
5-51
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the
blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5-52
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper
blade, so care should be used when pulling it away
from the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the wiper blade assembly to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Replace the wiper blade.
5-53
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Saab Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s
booklet included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-29.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
5-54
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-55
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-29.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department
of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-56
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C
of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-57
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the
Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-58
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.
5-59
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-60
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door
latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum
load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and
loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle
handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle with
more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-61
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-66 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the
wheel wrench to tighten the cable. For information on
storing or removing the spare tire, see Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-71.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29, for an example of the label and its location
on your vehicle. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106.
5-62
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-71.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-63
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. For examples of these labels and their
location on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get tires with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
load range, traction, ride and other things during normal
service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season
tread design, the TPC number will be followed by
an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you replace your tires with those not having a TPC
Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-64
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-65
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-66
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new original equipment
wheel.
5-67
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle has an accessory inflator system.
You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.
You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to the
proper pressure. It is not designed to inflate large objects
which will require more than five minutes to inflate, such
as an air mattress.
The accessory inflator is
located in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
behind an access cover,
near the liftgate opening.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab to access
the inflator.
You may have an air inflator kit that is located in the
glove compartment. It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.
5-68
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose if required.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator
on. The indicator light will remain on when the
inflator is running.
The system has an internal clock to prevent
overheating. The system will allow about
five minutes of running time, then the compressor
will stop. The indicator light will then begin to
flash. When the indicator is off, the inflator can be
started again by pressing the switch. If the
compressor is still hot, it may only run for a short
time before shutting off again.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in its
proper location. Remove the inflator hose from the
outlet during loading and unloading. Load leveling will
not function with the inflator hose attached to the inflator
outlet. See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 4-34 for more information.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
A continuous flashing indicator light may also
indicate a malfunction in the air suspension system.
See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System
on page 4-34 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
5-69
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-70
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-71
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-5 for more
information.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare located underneath your
vehicle.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
5-72
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
1. Insert the socket end of the extension on a 45 degree
angle downward into the hoist drive shaft hole. It will
be exposed when the rear gate is open and is just
above the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end of the
extension connects to the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See Secondary Latch System
on page 5-79 for more information.
3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when
the tire has been completely lowered, and pull
it through the wheel opening.
4. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-73
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
3. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
the jack.
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. Handle
D. Extension(s)
E. Wheel Wrench
4. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
Front Rear
5-74
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-75
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
8. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-76
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
9. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the
rounded end is
toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-77
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-106 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-106 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
12. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-78
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-82 for
instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you
or on either side of you as you pull the jack
out from the spare.
5-79
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-72.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
5-80
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
socket end of the extension connected to the wheel
wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper on a
45 degree angle downward. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of
the way.
11. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
12. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-81
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch won’t work
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
properly and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened
when your vehicle was being driven, the tire
might contact a person or another vehicle,
causing injury and, of course, damage to itself
as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare
tire is stored with its valve stem pointing up.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.
5-82
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted
spare.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle, with the valve stem pointed up and to
the rear.
2. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
3. Put the socket end of the extension (C), on a
45 degree angle downward, through the hole in
the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft (B).
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench (A) clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the
extension to tighten the cable.
5-83
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
To return the equipment to the proper location under the
rear seat of the vehicle, do the following:
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks and Jack
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B) and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-74 and Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-82.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need it
again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together.
5-84
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous some more than
others and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-85
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle’s
glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain
a product from your dealer to remove odors from
your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-86
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of your leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on
your leather.
5-87
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-88
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use
a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical
detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all
soap residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your Saab dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-93. Do not use
cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain
acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not
allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the
finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-89.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get Saab-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-93.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-89
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-90
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only Saab-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-91
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Saab dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your Saab dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your Saab dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saab will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-92
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and
Wire Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-93
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
5-94
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without like the radio or
cigarette lighter— and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located in
the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10
for more information on location.
5-95
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
L6 Engine
5-96
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
1
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High Beam
3
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High Beam
6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low Beam
7 Washer
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigar Lighter
Fuses Usage
14 Ignition Coils
15 Electric Adjustable Pedals
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center (DIC)
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26 Engine 1
27 Backup
28 Powertrain Control Module I
5-97
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
29 Oxygen Sensor
30 Air Conditioning
31 Truck Body Controller 1
50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Headlamp Driver Module
54 A.I.R. Solenoid
57 Ignition A
J-Case Fuses Usage
32 Trailer
33 Anti-lock Brake System
34 Ignition A
35 Driver’s Side Headlamp
36 Blower Motor
56 Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamp
58 Passenger’s Side Headlamp
5-98
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Windshield Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
Relays Usage
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
55 A.I.R. Solenoid
59 Low-Beam Headlamp
60 Ignition 1
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
5-99
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
V8 Engine
5-100
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
1
Electrically Controlled Air
Suspension
2
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High Beam
3
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
4 Trailer Back-Up
5 Driver’s Side Headlamp High Beam
6 Driver’s Side Headlamp Low Beam
7 Washer
8 Automatic Transfer Case
9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B
11 Fog Lamps
12 Stoplamp
13 Cigarette Lighter
Fuses Usage
14 Ignition Coils
15
Transmission Control
Module/Canister
16 Ignition B
18 Airbag System
19 Electric Brake
20 Cooling Fan
21 Horn
22 Ignition E
23 Electronic Throttle Control
24
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center
25 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
26 Engine 1
27 Backup
28 Engine Control Module 1
5-101
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
29 Engine Control Module
30 Air Conditioning
31 Injector Bank A
50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
52 Hazard Flashers
53 Transmission
54 Oxygen Sensor B
55 Oxygen Sensor A
56 Injector Bank B
57 Headlamp Driver Module
58 Truck Body Controller 1
59 Electric Adjustable Pedals
61 Ignition A
J-Case Fuses Usage
17 Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamp
32 Trailer
33 Anti-lock Brake System
34 Ignition A
35 Blower Motor
36 Driver’s Side Headlamp
62 Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Window Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
5-102
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Relays Usage
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedals
60 Powertrain
63 Low-Beam Headlamp
64 Ignition 1
Misc. Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear underseat fuse block is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle, under the second row seat.
Pull the seat cushion forward to access the fuse block.
5-103
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
01 Right Door Control Module
02 Left Door Control Module
03 Endgate Module 2
04 Truck Body Controller 3
05 Blank
06 Blank
07 Truck Body Controller 2
08 Power Seats
09 Rear Wiper
10 Driver Door Module
11 Amplifier
12 Passenger Door Module
13 Blank
14 Left Rear Parking Lamps
15 Blank
16
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
17 Right Rear Parking Lamps
5-104
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuses Usage
18 Locks
19 Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module
20 Blank
21 Locks
23 Blank
24 Unlock
25 Ignition 0
26 Overhead Battery/OnStar
®
System
27 Rainsense™ Wipers
28 Sunroof
29 Accessory
30 Parking Lamps
31 Truck Body Controller Accessory
32 Truck Body Controller 5
33 Front Wipers
34 Ignition 3
35 Vehicle Stop
36 Transmission Control Module
Fuses Usage
37 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B
38 Front Parking Lamps
39 Rear Left Turn Signal
40 Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1
41 Front Right Turn Signal
42 Radio
43 Trailer Park
44 Rear Right Turn Signal
45 Blank
46 Auxiliary Power 1
47 Blank
48 Ignition 0
49 Not Used
50 Blank
51 Front Left Turn Signal
52 Brakes
53 Truck Body Controller 4
5-105
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.9 lbs 0.85 kg
Cooling System
4200 L6 10.8 qt 10.2 L
5300 V8 12.2 qt 11.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4200 L6 7.0 qt 6.6 L
5300 V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L
Fuel Tank 21.7 gal 82.2 L
AWD Transfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4200 L6 S Automatic 0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-106
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
6-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
6-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer to have a qualified technician
do the work. See Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 5-3.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your dealer
do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine parts.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it and what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle.
6-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the change engine oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following
for “Maintenance I and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil light comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
6-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-14. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17. An Emission Control
Service.
••
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). ••
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. See footnote (k).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-62 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-9.
••
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
••
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
••
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
6-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•••
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•••
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
•••
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•••
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•••
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate
handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller
mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel
door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick
or squeak.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer can assist you with these checks
and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62.
6-9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your dealer for service.
6-10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-14.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco
®
Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Windshield Washer Solvent.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
Power Steering Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON
®
-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 12378508,
in Canada 10953626).
6-12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part Part Number ACDelco
®
Part Number
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C
Engine Oil Filter
4200 L6 89017342 PF61
5300 V8 88984215 PF46
Spark Plugs
4200 L6 12569190 41-981
5300 V8 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346
Rear 13 inches (33 cm) 15262794
6-14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-16
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-18
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-3
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-4
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-5
Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ...............................................7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ...............................................7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .....................7-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ...........7-7
Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information
7-1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Saab Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contact Saab Customer
Assistance Centre by calling 1-800-263-1999
(English and French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address and daytime phone number.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
The name of the selling dealership and location.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
Nature and details of the problem you are
experiencing.
When contacting Saab, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
If after contacting the Saab Customer Assistance Center
your concern has not been resolved, please refer to the
“Dispute Resolution Process” found in your Saab
Consumer’s Guide.
7-2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saab
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
Access information about your specific vehicle,
including an electronic version of this owner
manual (United States only).
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Receive e-mail service reminders
Receive recall notices for your specific vehicle
Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members (United States only).
Access a hand-held companion (PDA) application
Access an interactive vehicle design & racing game
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.owners.saabusa.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Saab has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Saab by dialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Saab encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Saab,
the letter should be addressed to Saab’s Customer
Assistance Center.
United States Customer Assistance
Saab Customer Assistance Center
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
1-800-955-9007
1-866-612-0380 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
7-3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Canada Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada, Limited
Customer Assistance Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-1999 (English and French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Roadside Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance
Saab has a strong commitment to customer satisfaction
and has established the Saab Roadside Assistance
Program. As the owner of a new Saab vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Program. This service
is intended to provide you with peace of mind as
you drive in the city or coast-to-coast throughout
the 4 year/50,000 mile term of your New Car Limited
Warranty.
24 Hour Roadside Assistance Number
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year. Our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of recommended service providers.
The following services are available to handle related
emergencies.
Towing
Locksmith Service
Flat tire change
Gas delivery
Battery jump starting
If it is necessary to tow your disabled Saab, it will be
taken to the nearest authorized Saab dealer, whenever
possible. The cost of towing will be covered by Roadside
Assistance if necessitated by a mechanical breakdown
covered under the New Car Limited Warranty.
If your 2005 Saab is disabled due to a failure covered
by the New Car Limited Warranty “Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage” and you are more than 100 miles from home,
Saab will reimburse you for certain expenses in
conjunction with the trip interruption. These expenses
include only reasonable and customary daily cost
for emergency lodging, meals, care rental or other
transportation to your destination incurred within
three days of the disablement, NOT to exceed $1000.
7-4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Calling for Assistance
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following information available to give to the advisor:
Your name
Location phone number
Location of your vehicle
Description of problem
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (the 17-digit VIN
can be found in the lower corner of the windshield,
driver’s side, or on your registration.)
Model and model year
License plate number
Vehicle color
Mileage (kilometers) on vehicle
Home address and phone
Name of your Saab dealer
While we hope that you never have the occasion to
require roadside assistance, it is an added security while
traveling for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away.
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
Travel Planning
The Saab Roadside Assistance Program also makes
available a variety of trip planning information:
Highway maps
Suggested trip routing
Points of interest/Tourist information
These items and more will be provided to you when you
call 1-800-852-9001 and outline your intended trip.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
7-5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the
data is required. Saab will not access information about
a crash event or share it with others other than:
with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle
is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
as part of Saab’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives data,
Saab may:
use the data for Saab research needs,
make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-Saab organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar
®
, please check
the OnStar
®
subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
7-6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. You may call them at 1-800-333-0510
or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
Saab. Please call the Saab Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-955-9007, or write:
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Saab Customer Assistance Center
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999
(English or French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
7-7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for Saab
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saab
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model Saab vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
A
Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-68
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-19
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-58
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-5
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-22
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20
Air Suspension ............................................... 4-34
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-5
Airbag System ................................................ 1-45
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-58
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-52
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-54
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-51
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-52
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-50
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-47
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-44
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-8
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-41
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-96
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-96
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-85
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-91
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-88
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-85
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87
Finish Care ................................................. 5-89
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-92
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-87
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-92
Tires .......................................................... 5-91
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-92
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-93
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-90
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-56
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-94
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................. 3-95
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-95
1
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-96
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................... 3-81
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-57
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-69
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-92
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-56
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-93
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-95
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-96
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-20
Operation ................................................... 2-24
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-38
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-20
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-22
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-48
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-47
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-106
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-30, 4-24, 4-35
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88
Your CD and DVD Player ............................. 3-95
Your CDs and DVDs .................................... 3-95
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-44
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-44
2
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-41
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-68
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-35
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-41
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-43
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................... 5-8
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-92
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-31
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-27
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-37
Older Children ............................................. 1-25
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ............................... 1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-42
Top Strap ................................................... 1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-37
Child Restraints (cont.)
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-34
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-91
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-89
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87
Finish Care ................................................. 5-89
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-87
Tires .......................................................... 5-91
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-92
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-90
Climate Control System
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-20
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Rear .......................................................... 3-24
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-22
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
3
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Cooling System .............................................. 5-27
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-40
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-41
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .................... 7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government .............................................. 7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government .............................................. 7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-4
Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-7
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-18
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-50
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
City ........................................................... 4-18
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-15
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-28
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-20
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-81
4
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-94
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95
Headlamps ................................................. 5-95
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-95
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-103
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-95
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System .... 4-34
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-19
Battery ....................................................... 5-38
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-39
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-35
Coolant ...................................................... 5-22
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-10
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-30
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-32
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-17
Overheating ................................................ 5-25
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-40
Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-5
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-24
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-96
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-70
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-71
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-82
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-33
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-5
California Fuel .............................................. 5-4
Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-43
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-8
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-6
5
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Fuel (cont.)
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-5
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-4
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-43
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-103
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-95
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-41
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-42
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-36
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-4
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-42
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-41
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-47
Headlamps .................................................... 3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-16
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Electrical System ......................................... 5-95
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-48
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-47
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
6
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System ................. 2-36
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System Operation ... 2-37
Hood
Checking Things Under .................................. 5-8
Release ....................................................... 5-9
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-12
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-27
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-60
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-55
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-19
Dome ........................................................ 3-17
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-18
Fog ........................................................... 3-17
Reading ..................................................... 3-18
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-37
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-39
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-13
Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-13
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-29
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-34
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-33
7
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Light (cont.)
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-39
Charging System ......................................... 3-32
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-41
Check Gas Cap .......................................... 3-43
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-40
Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-42
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-41
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-43
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-30
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .................... 3-28
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-40
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-40
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................ 3-41
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Exit ........................................................... 3-18
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-8
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-29
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Locks (cont.)
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-43
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-42
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
8
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-45
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass ........... 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-34
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-33
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-34
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-33
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ...................................................... 3-81
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-27
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-39
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-38
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-17
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-25
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar
®
System, see OnStar
®
Manual ............... 2-34
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-34
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-33
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-34
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-33
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-41
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
9
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-29
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-30
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-54
Passing ......................................................... 4-11
PASS-Key
®
III ................................................ 2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation .................................. 2-18
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-19
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-95
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-40
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-20
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 2-15
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-25
Radios .......................................................... 3-56
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................. 3-95
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-95
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................... 3-81
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-57
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-69
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-92
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-56
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-93
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-95
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-45
Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-8
10
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-24
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Floor Storage Lid .................................... 2-43
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-22
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-92
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-81
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-5
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-19
Rearview Mirror with Compass .......................... 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-34
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-40
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-72
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-51
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ................................... 7-7
Saab ........................................................... 7-7
United States Government .............................. 7-6
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-59
Replacing Restraint System
Parts After a Crash .................................. 1-60
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-19
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-28
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-30
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-28
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-24
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-88
Driver Position ............................................ 1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-19
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-19
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-18
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-7
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-45
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
11
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Seats (cont.)
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-5
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-79
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-41
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-39
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-39
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-42
Security Light ................................................. 3-40
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of Your Vehicle .............................. 5-4
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-41
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-35
Publications Ordering Information ..................... 7-7
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-58
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-56
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-92
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-29
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-84
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 5-68
Installing .................................................... 5-74
Removing ................................................... 5-72
Storing ....................................................... 5-82
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-106
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-94
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-41
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-41
Glove Box .................................................. 2-41
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-42
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-41
Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................. 2-43
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-45
Suspension .................................................... 4-34
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 5-50
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-93
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
PASS-Key
®
III ............................................. 2-17
PASS-Key
®
III Operation .............................. 2-18
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-22
12
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 5-68
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-91
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-71
Cleaning .................................................... 5-91
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-70
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-74
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-72
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-79
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-84
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-82
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-66
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-35
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-37
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-34
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-35
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-34
Traction
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-8
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-24
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-27
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-95
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-29
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-50
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-5
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-94
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94
13
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-45
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-66
Replacement ............................................... 5-66
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-34
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-90
Windshield Replacement .................................. 5-51
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-34
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-51
Fuses ........................................................ 5-95
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-96
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual
9

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Saab 9-7X - 2005 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Saab 9-7X - 2005 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 2,22 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info